2017 Dodge Durango User`s Guide

2017 Dodge Durango User`s Guide
W h et h er it ’s pro v i di ng i nfo rm ati o n a b o u t s p e c i fi c p ro d u c t
f ea t u r es, t a kin g a to ur thro u g h yo ur v e hi c l e ’s h e ri ta g e , k n o wi n g
wh a t st ep s t o ta k e fo l l o w i n g an ac c i de n t o r s c h e d u l i n g yo u r
ne xt ap p oin t m en t , we kno w yo u ’ l l fi n d th e a p p a n i mp o rta n t e xte n s i o n o f
yo ur Dod g e veh icle. S i m pl y do w n l o ad th e a p p , s e l e c t yo u r m a k e a n d
mo del a n d en joy t h e r id e . To ge t th i s ap p , go d i re c tl y to th e A p p S to re o r
Googl e P la y a n d en t er t he s e arc h k e yw o rd “ D o d g e ” (U . S. m a rk e ts o n l y).
Dodge. c o m / E N / O wn e r s p ro v i de s s p e c i al o ffe rs tai l o re d to yo u r n e e d s ,
c ustom iz ed veh icle g al l e ri e s , p e rs o n a l i ze d s e rv i c e re c o rd s a n d m o re .
To ge t th is in f or m a t ion , j u s t c re ate an ac c o u n t an d c he c k b a c k o fte n .
DOWNLOAD A FREE
ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE OWNER’S
MANUAL AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
BY VISITING:
W W W. MOPA R .COM / DODGE,
2017
USER
DURANGO
GUIDE
W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / O W NE R S / M A NU A L S
OR W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / WA R R A N T Y (U.S.);
W W W . O W N E R S . M O P A R . C A / E N ( C A N A D A ).
©2017 F C A U S L L C . A L L R IG H T S R E S E RV E D .
DODGE IS A R E G IS T E R E D T R A D E MA R K O F F C A U S LLC .
17WD01-926-AA
D U R A N GO
2989662_17d_Durango_UG_030117.indd 1
F OURT H E DI T I ON R EV 1
US E R GUI DE
3/1/17 11:03 AM
IMPORTANT
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important
f e a t u r e s o f y o u r v e h i c l e . Yo u r O w n e r ’s M a n u a l , N a v i g a t i o n / U c o n n e c t
Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be found on your DVD (if applicable)
or by visiting the website on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope
you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
v i s i t i n g w w w. t e c h a u t h o r i t y. c o m a n d C a n a d i a n r e s i d e n t s c a n p u r c h a s e
replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklet by calling
1 800 423-6343 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting
your dealer.
The dri v er ’s p r im a r y r esp o n s i bi l i ty
is the s af e op er a t ion of t h e v e hi c l e .
D ri vi ng w h ile d ist r a ct ed c a n re s u l t
in l o ss of veh icle con t r ol, re s u l ti n g
in a col l ision a n d p er sona l i n j ury.
FCA US LLC st r on g ly r ec o m me n d s
t hat the d r iver u se ex t r em e c a u ti o n
when us in g a n y d evice o r fe atu re
t h at may t a ke t h eir a tte n ti o n
off the ro a d . U se of a n y e l e c tri c a l
devi c es,
su ch
as
c e l l ul ar
t el e phones, com p u t er s, po rta b l e
r adi o s, v eh icle n a vig a t io n o r o th e r
devi c es, b y t h e d r iver w hi l e th e
2989662_17d_Durango_UG_030117.indd 2
v e h i c l e i s mo v i ng i s d a n g e ro u s a n d
c o u l d l e a d to a se ri o u s c o l l i s i o n .
Te xti ng w hi l e dri v i n g i s a l s o
d a n g e ro u s a n d s h o u l d n e v e r b e
d o n e w hi l e the v e hi c l e i s m o v i n g . I f
yo u fi nd yo urs e l f un a b l e to d e v o te
yo u r ful l atte n ti o n to v e h i c l e
o p e ra ti o n, p u l l o f f th e ro a d to a
s a fe l o c a ti o n an d sto p yo u r v e h i c l e .
S o m e s ta te s o r p ro v i n c e s p ro h i b i t
th e u s e o f c e l l u l ar te l e p h o n e s o r
te xti ng w hi l e d ri v in g . I t i s a l wa ys
th e dri v e r’s re s po n s i b i l i ty to c o m p l y
w i th al l l o c a l l aw s .
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your
new Dodge vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common
questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and
important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Yo u r d r i v i n g a b i l i t y c a n b e s e r i o u s l y i m p a i r e d w i t h b l o o d a l c o h o l
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
R i d e w i t h a d e s i g n a t e d n o n - d r i n k i n g d r i v e r, c a l l a c a b , a f r i e n d , o r
use public transportation.
WARNING!
D r i v i n g a f t e r d r i n k i n g c a n l e a d t o a n a c c i d e n t . Yo u r p e r c e p t i o n s a r e
l e s s s h a r p , y o u r r e f l e x e s a r e s l o w e r, a n d y o u r j u d g m e n t i s i m p a i r e d
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
3/1/17 11:03 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
....... 3
CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
DRIVER COCKPIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . 8
GETTING STARTED
KEY FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOTE START . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . .
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS . . . . .
HEATED STEERING WHEEL . . . . .
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 10
. . . 12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
16
17
18
55
59
65
67
69
. . . 70
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . 141
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . 155
UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . 182
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . 182
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . 183
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
POWER INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . 191
UTILITY
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK . . . . . . . . . . 194
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS) . . . . . . . 194
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM
LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
HEADLIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) . . . . 81
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRRORS . . . . . 86
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . 87
ELECTRONIC GEAR SELECTOR . . . . . . 90
AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE . . . . . . . 94
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . 94
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . 97
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . 98
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST . . . . 103
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP CAMERA . . 103
LANESENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
BLIND SPOT MONITORING . . . . . . . . 105
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
WIND BUFFETING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . 202
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . 209
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . 210
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . 223
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . 226
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . 227
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . 228
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL . . . . . . 228
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . .
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO . . . .
UCONNECT ACCESS . . . . . . . .
UCONNECT 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
110
112
113
114
128
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . .
FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . .
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE RECORD . . . . . . . .
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . .
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . .
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . .
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
229
230
232
234
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
235
237
237
241
242
245
248
255
. 264
. 265
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER . . .
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
IMPAIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING . . . . . . .
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE
UNITED STATES . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
. 267
. 267
. 267
. 267
. 268
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY
MOPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS . . . . 270
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that
it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
Your new FCA US vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under some
driving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for attentive
driving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your eyes
from the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your eyes more
than momentarily off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications
and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the
important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.
The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed owner's information which
can be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD also
includes videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radios if equipped with DVD player capabilities). Additional DVD operational information is located on the back of the DVD sleeve.
For complete owner information,
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals.
refer
to
your
Owner's
Manual
on
FCA US is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By converting
from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your vehicle,
together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the stress on
our environment.
3
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be
deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution (excluding legal lines).
WARNING!
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk
of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference
with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual for further details.
Rollover Warning
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
4
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME
WARNING!
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk
of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference
with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the
vehicle.
• Refer to your Owner's Manual for further details.
• Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)
The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, or
chargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including Keyless
Enter-N-Go and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of your
wireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the situation
improves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best,
has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
5
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
DRIVER COCKPIT
1. Power Mirror Controls
2. Headlight Switch pg. 76
3. Paddle Shifters pg. 92
4. Instrument Cluster pg. 8
5. Instrument Cluster Display pg. 182
6. Engine Start/Stop Button pg. 16
7. Audio System (Touchscreen Radio Shown) pg. 113
8. Passenger Power Window Controls
9. Glove Compartment
10. Tune/Scroll Knob/Browse/Enter Button
6
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
11. Switch Panel
• ParkSense pg. 103
• Stop/Start Off
• ECO Off pg. 94
• Sport Mode
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF pg. 208
12. Media Hub
13. Gear Selector pg. 90
14. Front Power Outlet pg. 189
15. Speed Control pg. 78
16. Instrument Cluster Display Controls pg. 182
17. Instrument Panel Dimmer pg. 76
18. Parking Brake Release
19. Power Windows
20. Power Door Locks
7
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
(See page 202 for Instrument Cluster Warning Lights.)
8
C O N T R O L S AT A G L A N C E
3. Temperature Gauge
4. Fuel Gauge
(See page 207 for Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights.)
9
GETTING STARTED
KEY FOB
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation,
a back up method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the
key fob (side opposite of the Emergency
Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP
button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Locking And Unlocking The Doors And
Liftgate
Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash, and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Key Fob
1 — Liftgate
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic
Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
10
GETTING STARTED
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button, as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three operating positions which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Not Detected Feature
If the ignition position does not change with a push of the ignition button, and the
instrument cluster display message “Key Fob Not Detected” is being displayed, the key
fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the keyless push button ignition. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the keyless ignition push button and push to operate
the ignition. Once the starter engages and the engine starts remove the key fob from the
keyless ignition push button.
Low Or Dead Key Fob Battery Starting Procedure
11
GETTING STARTED
Power Liftgate
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to power open/close the
Power Liftgate. If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate
will reverse to the full open position.
Also, the Power Liftgate may be closed by pushing the liftgate switch located on the left
rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Pushing once will close the liftgate only. This
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
Panic Alarm
1. Push the PANIC button once to turn the Panic Alarm on.
2. Wait approximately three seconds and push the button a second time to turn the Panic
Alarm off.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
REMOTE START
Push the remote start button
on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the
remote start button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, with a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob within 5 ft (1.5m) of the
driver's side of the vehicle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door
automatically and then push the Start/Stop ignition button until it is in the ON/RUN
position.
With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the key fob after two consecutive timeouts.
12
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Keyless Enter-N-Go system is an enhancement to the vehicle's key fob. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) and liftgate without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons as well as starting and stopping the vehicle with the push
of a button.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, lap top or other
electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob
located outside the vehicle and within 5 ft
(1.5m) of the driver or passenger side door
handle, grab either front door handle to
unlock the door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
13
GETTING STARTED
To Lock The Vehicle
Both front door handles have buttons located on the outside of the handle. With one of the
vehicle's Keyless Enter-N-Go key fobs located outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5m)
of the driver's or passenger front door handle, push the door handle button to lock all four
doors and liftgate.
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could
unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks” has two options available. “Driver Door” and “All
Doors” will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select
between “Driver Door” and “All Doors,” Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your
Instrument
Panel”
in
the
Owner’s
Manual
on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
• If a key fob is detected in the vehicle when locking the vehicle using the power door
lock switch, the doors and liftgate will unlock, and the horn will chirp three times. On
the third attempt, your key fob can be locked inside the vehicle.
• After pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go lock button, you must wait two seconds before
you can lock or unlock the vehicle using the door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If a Keyless Enter-N-Go door handle has not been used for 72 hours, the Keyless
Enter-N-Go feature for that handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front door
handle will reactivate the door handle's Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
14
GETTING STARTED
Lock Or Unlock The Liftgate
To Lock The Liftgate — With a key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
passive entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate — The liftgate
passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic release switch to open the liftgate.
NOTE:
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the
Owner’s
Manual
on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals
for
further information.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
15
GETTING STARTED
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Starting
Perform the following starting procedure
with the key fob inside the vehicle:
1. While pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. If
the engine fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
2. To stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the button
again.
Stopping
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift the Transmission to PARK (P).
ENGINE START/STOP Button
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the transmission is not in PARK and the vehicle is in motion, the ENGINE START/STOP
button must be held for two seconds with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before
the engine will shut off.
Accessory Positions With Engine Off
NOTE:
The following functions are with the driver’s foot off of the Brake Pedal (transmission in
PARK).
16
GETTING STARTED
Beginning With The Ignition Switch In The OFF Position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to cycle the ignition to the ACC position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF
position.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity, and the ignition is returned to the OFF
position.
Ignition Positions
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks and liftgate are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster display will flash.
To Arm
Cycle the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button until the button display indicates that
the vehicle ignition is OFF. Push the power door lock switch while the door is open, push
the key fob lock button, or with one of the key fobs located outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, push the Keyless Enter-N-Go
lock button located on the door handle.
NOTE:
After pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go lock button, you must wait two seconds before you
can lock or unlock the vehicle via the door handle.
To Disarm
Push the key fob unlock button or with one of the key fobs located outside the vehicle and
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles. Grab the Keyless
Enter-N-Go door handle and enter the vehicle, then push the Keyless Enter-N-Go
START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
17
GETTING STARTED
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with
a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
18
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when
the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
19
GETTING STARTED
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
20
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle
are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
21
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately
and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
22
GETTING STARTED
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the
back of the front seat, and next to your
arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below your
1 — Seat Belt
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap 2 — Seat Belt Buckle
belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat
belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
23
GETTING STARTED
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage
in a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature.
This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the reAdjustable Upper Anchorage
lease button. To verify the shoulder belt
anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended
and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position,
your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt
Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
24
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced
for the mother and the unborn child if they
are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of
the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the
chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
25
GETTING STARTED
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this
case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a "click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt
will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
26
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the
head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires
deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends
forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front
passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
27
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side
impact. However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may
deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft
Foam And Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the
Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active
Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause
personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
28
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to
“Supplemental Active Head Restraints” in “Getting Started.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision, the front half of the head
restraint will be extended forward and separated from the rear half of the head restraint
(see image). Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint
must be reset into the original position to best protect the occupant for all types of
collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result in
damage to the AHRs that could impair their function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
29
GETTING STARTED
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is
in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed
to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
30
GETTING STARTED
Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
31
GETTING STARTED
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined
by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that
may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
32
GETTING STARTED
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags
fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the
instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat
belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
33
GETTING STARTED
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the
seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the
door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag Label
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
34
GETTING STARTED
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of
head or other injuries to front and rear
seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering
the side windows. An inflating SABIC
pushes the outside edge of the trim out
of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the
SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying
air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and
certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
35
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection
in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air
Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the
size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection.
In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air
bags deploy.
36
GETTING STARTED
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate.
In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of
the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
37
GETTING STARTED
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the
occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
38
GETTING STARTED
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including
your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
39
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and
children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could
not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly
injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual
to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels
attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
40
GETTING STARTED
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Recommended Type of Child
Age
Restraint
Children who are two years
Either an Infant Carrier or a
old or younger and who have
Convertible Child Restraint,
Infants and Toddlers
not reached the height or
facing rearward in the rear
weight limits of their child
seat of the vehicle
restraint
Children who are at least two
Forward-Facing Child Reyears old or who have outstraint with a five-point HarSmall Children
grown the height or weight
ness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing
rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Children who have out-grown
Belt Positioning Booster
their forward-facing child
Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children
restraint, but are too small to
belt, seated in the rear seat
properly fit the vehicle’s seat
of the vehicle
belt
Children 12 years old or
Children Too Large for Child younger, who have out-grown Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in
Restraints
the height or weight limit of
the rear seat of the vehicle
their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and
convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do,
so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are
still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
41
GETTING STARTED
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible
child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long
as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
42
GETTING STARTED
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint
Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
ForwardFacing Child
Restraint
ForwardFacing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt
LATCH –
Seat Belt +
Lower AnOnly
Lower AnTop Tether
chors Only
chors + Top
Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
43
GETTING STARTED
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and
LATCH Label
one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
44
GETTING STARTED
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions (6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage
system until the combined
What is the weight limit
weight of the child and the
(child’s weight + weight of
child restraint is 65 lbs
the child restraint) for using
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
the LATCH anchorage sysand tether anchor instead of
tem to attach the child rethe LATCH system once the
straint?
combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt
when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forwardCan the LATCH anchorages
facing child restraint.
and the seat belt be used
Booster seats may be attogether to attach a rearNo
tached to the LATCH anchorfacing or forward-facing
ages if allowed by the
child restraint?
booster seat manufacturer.
See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed
7 Passenger: Use the seat
in the center position using
N/A — 6 Passenger
belt and tether anchor to
the inner LATCH lower anNo — 7 Passenger
install a child seat in the
chorages?
center seating position.
45
GETTING STARTED
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center
position does not have dediCan two child restraints be
cated LATCH lower anchorattached using a common
No
ages, use the seat belt to
lower LATCH anchorage?
install a child seat in the
center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch
the back of the front passenCan the rear-facing child
ger seat if the child restraint
restraint touch the back of
Yes
manufacturer also allows
the front passenger seat?
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
7 Passenger: Only the head
Can the head restraints be
No — 6 Passenger
restraint in the center posiremoved?
Yes — 7 Passenger
tion may be removed.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where
it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the
seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
46
GETTING STARTED
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
2nd Row Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back
of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain's Chair)
47
GETTING STARTED
3rd Row Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back
of the seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to
attach to the top tether anchorage and a
way to tighten the strap after it is attached
to the anchorage.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap
Tether Anchorages
48
GETTING STARTED
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This
position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical installation
instructions.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat
belts, the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the
upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm
rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
49
GETTING STARTED
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes
with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer
to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.
50
GETTING STARTED
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
51
GETTING STARTED
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit
Always use the tether anchor
(child’s weight + weight of
when using the seat belt to
the child restraint) for using
Weight limit of the Child
install a forward facing child
the Tether Anchor with the
Restraint
restraint, up to the recomseat belt to attach a forward
mended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Contact between the front
Can the rear-facing child
passenger seat and the child
restraint touch the back of
Yes
restraint is allowed, if the
the front passenger seat?
child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
7 Passenger: Only the head
Can the head restraints be
No — 6 Passenger
restraint in the center posiremoved?
Yes — 7 Passenger
tion may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be
Do not twist the buckle stalk
twisted to tighten the seat
No
in a seating position with an
belt against the belt path of
ALR retractor.
the child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it
to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled
all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
52
GETTING STARTED
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions
to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight
if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages
in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
53
GETTING STARTED
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path for the strap between
the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint,
and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the
tether strap around the outboard side of
the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On
Seatback)
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the seats, to attach
a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
54
GETTING STARTED
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear-impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
55
GETTING STARTED
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this
equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR) will be split in two halves, with the
front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends
forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front
passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
56
GETTING STARTED
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active
Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” in the Owner’s
Manual
on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for
further information.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
57
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or
portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head
Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active
Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause
personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold
forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning either seat to its upright
position, raise the head restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head restraints are
not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to
raise it or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their
upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row head restraints can be folded using
the Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.
58
GETTING STARTED
Press the Headrest Fold button
to power fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward using the Headrest Fold button. The
head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats.
FRONT SEATS
Power Seats
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power driver and front passenger seats.
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up
or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Recline Switch
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
59
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped
by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to
two different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory
profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if
equipped) and a set of desired radio station
presets. Your key fob can also be programmed to recall the same positions when
the unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other key fob can be linked to
memory position 2.
60
Power Lumbar Switch
GETTING STARTED
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function.
• The memory position (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two
pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to
desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering
column [if equipped], and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on
the memory switch.
Memory Seat Buttons
4. Within five seconds, push and release
either of the memory position buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will
show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in
PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for
further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle's ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
61
GETTING STARTED
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"
in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Within 10 seconds, push and release the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle is not in PARK, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch, push memory
position button (1) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the key fob, push the unlock button
on the key fob linked to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch, push memory
position button (2) on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the key fob, push the unlock button
on the key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or
2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, and the power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where you have the driver’s seat
positioned when you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
62
GETTING STARTED
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position.
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is between
0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable
features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
Manual Seat Adjustment
Forward/Rearward
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the
front of the seat near the floor and release it
when the seat is at the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward
and backward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Adjusting Bar Location
63
GETTING STARTED
Recliner
Lift the rear lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back and release when
seat is in desired position.
Recliner Lever Location
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline lever and push the
seatback forward. To return to the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of
the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted,
and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be severely injured
or killed. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped
by an obstruction in the seat's path.
64
GETTING STARTED
REAR SEATS
60/40 Split Rear Seat
The left or right side of the second row seatback can be folded flat to carry cargo. The left
and right side of the second row seat can also be tumbled forward to allow access to the
third row seat.
Seat Release Lever
Fold And Tumble
Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
NOTE:
Also, pulling upward on this handle allows the outboard seating positions to be reclined.
Tumble the seat forward using the red pull strap located behind the seatback.
NOTE:
If sitting in the third row seat, pull rearward
on the tumble pull strap located at the rear
of the seat and tumble the seat forward.
Tumble Pull Strap
65
GETTING STARTED
Rear Captain's Chairs
Fold And Tumble
The left or right side of the second row
seatback can be folded flat to carry cargo.
When the lower storage compartment is
accessed using the rear push button it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat
mode.”
Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to
be lowered below fold flat seat plane and
protect the armrest vinyl from damage
when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Rear Captain's Chairs
The left and right side of the second row
seat can also be tumbled forward to allow
access to the third row seat. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat. Pulling
upward on this handle allows the outboard seating positions to be reclined.
Tumble the seat forward using the red pull strap located behind the seatback.
NOTE:
If sitting in the third row seat, pull rearward on the tumble pull strap located at the rear of
the seat and tumble the seat forward.
If your vehicle is equipped with a mini
console there is a stepping pad to allow
passengers to easily access the third row
seats.
50/50 Third Row Folding Seat
Either or both third row seats can be folded
forward to increase the rear cargo storage
area.
After opening the liftgate, either seat can be
folded flat by pulling up the release handle
on the back of the seat.
Stepping Pad Location
A seat that is folded flat can be returned to the upright position by using the pull strap
located on the back of the seat next to the release handle.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright position, or tumbled when folding the
third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap located on the back of the seat.
66
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in the tumbled position. The second
row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure
to follow these instructions could result in personal injury.
HEATED/VENTILATED SEATS
HEATED SEATS
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat
cushions and seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, one
for LO, and none for off.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
67
GETTING STARTED
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. There are two heated
seat switches
that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and
none for off.
• Push the heated seat button
once to select HI-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to select LO-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats, the seat cushion and seat back will have
fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
68
GETTING STARTED
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You
can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be
programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes or more
before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
• Press the heated steering wheel button
off.
once to turn the heating element on.
a second time to turn the heating element
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual
on the www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
69
GETTING STARTED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward
until fully engaged.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
Handle
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
70
GETTING STARTED
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column
lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever
up or down as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the lever
toward you or push the lever away from you
as desired.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
71
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)
in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws
contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further
details.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as
an indication of an engine problem or malfunction.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
72
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime
Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high
beams. Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams
back on, or shut the high beams off.
Windshield Wipers And Washers
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on
the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Wiper/Washer” in this section.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings,
the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the park position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the park position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single
wiping cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above
10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately
18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
73
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the steering wheel) and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn
on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will
operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers
necessary. Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for
the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four
settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive.
Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used
if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver desires
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
74
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing
performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the automatic
transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the
gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. This is to disable the wiper system
while going through an automatic car wash.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will
continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the switch, the wipers
will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF
position, rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF
position. The wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position.
75
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released, the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically
return to the “park” position.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped).
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight
switch is on, the parking lights, taillights,
license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the
headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Headlight Switch
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic
headlight and fog light (if equipped)
lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass
and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
1 — Auto
2 — Rotate Headlight Switch
3 — Push Fog Lights
4 — Rotate Dimmer
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels.
To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. The headlight time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
76
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting
at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view
will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and
other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened or when the
dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated to its
farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with a key fob and the unlock button
is pushed, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to the (O) off detent, will cause
all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s
battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement
the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
77
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control
on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the
Speed Control. “CRUISE CONTROL
READY” will appear on the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is
on. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. “CRUISE CONTROL
OFF” will appear on the instrument cluster
display to indicate the Speed Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not
in use.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push Cancel
2 — Push Set+/Accel
3 — Push Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push Set-/Decel
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (–) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message, “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH (km/h)”, will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp, along
with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster display when the
speed is set.
78
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the OFF position erases the set speed
from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
79
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed decrement shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have
an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
80
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly
the same as Speed Control with only a
couple of differences. With this option, you
can set a specified distance you would like
to maintain between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set
speed.
ACC On/Off
• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/
Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
ACC READY will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the ACC is on.
• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn
the system off.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) OFF will appear in the instrument cluster display to
indicate the ACC is off.
To Vary The ACC Speed
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed increment shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
81
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details. The speed decrement shown is
dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle.
If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will
release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur
while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary
to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
82
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Distance Setting (ACC Only)
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting
between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance
to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Increase button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the
target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
While the ACC With Stop System is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver
seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC With Stop System will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will appear in the instrument cluster display
and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
Changing Modes (ACC Only)
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode can be turned off and the system can be
operated as Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode. While in the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode the distance setting feature will be disabled and the system
will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
83
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the
vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving
within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime
will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving
situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed.
For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
your Owner’s Manual at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be
aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes
function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
84
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the driver with audible warnings
and visual warnings within the instrument cluster display, to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect display in the controls settings.
• To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision button once.
• To turn the FCW system back on, press the forward collision button again.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is on, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from warning you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to off, FCW OFF will be shown in
the instrument cluster display.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has three settings and can be changed within the Uconnect System
Screen:
• Far
• Medium
• Near
Far
The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of the
vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
85
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Medium
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the Active Braking is in the on
setting. This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
NOTE:
Changing the Active Braking status to off prevents the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision. Active braking can be turned off in the Uconnect controls
settings.
Refer to the Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid
a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRRORS
The rearview and driver side exterior mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
You can turn the feature on or off when the Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is selected
through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
86
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake. Always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children,
and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for
two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
87
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
will AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK
Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three
modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
AutoPark — If Equipped
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking)
“P” is indicated in the Instrument Cluster Display and near the gear selector. If the
"P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift
your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
88
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless
the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”will display in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”will be displayed in the
instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the transmission will default to
NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle left in the
NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
89
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A
warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the Driver’s Door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
Instrument Cluster Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC GEAR SELECTOR
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient eight-speed transmission. The Electronic
gear selector is located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
• To select a gear range, simply rotate the
gear selector.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK or from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE.
• To shift past multiple gear ranges at once
(such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate
the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
• Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
Electronic Gear Selector
90
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying
to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission
gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before
exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children),
and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
91
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control,
giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold
slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
AutoStick Shift Paddles
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE, it will operate automatically, shifting between the
eight available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering wheel-mounted
shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.
When AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Personal Settings.
92
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected
by the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain
in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After
a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear
possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift paddle until "D" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
93
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during
normal driving conditions. Push the “eco” switch in the center stack of the instrument
panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the switch indicates when ECO mode is
disabled.
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is
engaged, the vehicle control systems will
change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• The overall driving performance will be
more conservative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature
and other factors.
ECO Switch
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the
engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine
start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP
ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START
READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed.
94
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the
Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting And Operating” section located in your
Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen. In the following
situations, the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not
been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START
system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the
throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine
restart.
95
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on
the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual
on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for
further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system), the engine
will not be stopped.
STOP/START Off Switch
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start System, refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
96
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up
for typical enthusiast driving. The engine,
transmission, and steering systems are all
set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
provide improved throttle response and
modified shifting for an enhanced driving
experience, as well the greatest amount of
steering feel. This mode may be activated
and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank.
Sport Mode Button
97
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS
Uconnect 5.0 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Climate Controls
1 — Max A/C Button
2 — A/C Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — Front Defroster Button
5 — Rear Defroster Button
6 — Climate Control Button
7 — Mode Control Button
98
8 — Rear Climate Button
9 — Climate Off Button
10 — Auto Button
11 — Sync Button
12 — Blower Speed Button
13 — Temperature Control Button
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Uconnect 8.4 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Climate Controls
1 — MAX A/C Button
2 — A/C Button
3 — Air Recirculation Button
4 — AUTO Button
5 — FRONT Defroster Button
6 — REAR Defroster Button
7 — REAR Climate Button
8 — Passenger Temperature Up
9 — Passenger Temperature Down
10 — SYNC Button
11 — Blower Speed Buttons
12 — Mode Control Buttons
13 — OFF Button
14 — Driver Temperature Down
15 — Driver Temperature Up
99
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Climate Control Knobs
Automatic Climate Controls
1 — Driver Temperature Up
2 — OFF Button
3 — Blower Speed Knob
4 — Passenger Temperature Up
5 — REAR Defroster Button
6 — FRONT Defroster Button
7 — Passenger Temperature Down
8 — AUTO Button
9 — Driver Temperature Down
10 — Air Recirculation Button
11 — A/C Button
Automatic Operation
• Press the AUTO button.
• Select the desired temperature by pressing the Temperature Control buttons.
• The system will maintain the set temperature automatically.
100
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Air Conditioning (A/C)
• If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit AUTO
mode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will be set at the closest mode and blower
position that the system was operating in AUTO.
MAX A/C
• MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
• Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the
touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
• In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user
settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
SYNC Temperature Button
• Press the “SYNC” button on the touchscreen to control the driver and passenger
temperatures simultaneously. Press the “SYNC” button on the touchscreen a second
time to control the temperatures individually.
Air Recirculation
• Use Air Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.
• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.
• If the Recirculation button is pressed while in front defrost mode, the indicator will
flash three times to indicate that recirculation state is not allowed in front defrost
mode.
Heated Mirrors
The mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster.
101
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Rear Temperature Controls
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
1 — Rear Blower Speed And AUTO
Mode
2 — Rotate Blower Control
3 — Rotate Temperature Control
4 — Rotate Mode Control
The rear controls for the ATC System are located in the headliner, near the center of the
vehicle.
The rear temperature controls can be turned on two ways:
• Press the “REAR” control button on the Uconnect front temperature control screen
and adjust to the desired rear temperature.
• Rotate the Rear Temperature Control or the Rear Blower Control knobs on the rear
temperature controls.
Press the “REAR” button and then the “OFF” button on the Uconnect front temperature
control screen to turn the rear controls off.
102
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the CustomerProgrammable Features section of the Uconnect System.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear bumper while the vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appear in
the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound (when Sound and Display is
selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System
screen). As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the chime rate will change from single
1/2 second tone, to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Cleaning The ParkSense Sensors
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display, clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do
not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP CAMERA
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on the
radio display screen, located on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in park, neutral or drive, the Rear View Camera can be activated with
the “Rear View Camera” button in the Controls menu. This feature allows the driver to
monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to ten seconds
while at speed. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the “X” button on the
touchscreen.
If the radio display screen appears foggy, clean the camera lens located on the liftgate.
103
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
LANESENSE
The LaneSense system can be enabled and disabled with the LaneSense button, located
on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
• Push the LaneSense button
to turn the system ON (LED turns off).
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of
torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across
the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
Refer to your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
104
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
BLIND SPOT MONITORING
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle
12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both
outside rear view mirrors to let the driver
know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE,
and enters standby mode when the vehicle
is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle
moves into a blind spot zone.
Rear Detection Zones
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute
the radio to notify you of objects that have
entered the detection zones.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking
Blind Spot Mirror
space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a
clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” in your
Owner’s Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
105
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle,
an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is
reduced.
• If the Hazard Warning Flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual
alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn signal and Hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always
requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
106
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console.
Opening Sunroof
Express Open
Push the switch rearward and release it
within one-half second. The sunroof will
fully open and stop automatically.
Manual Open
Push and hold the switch rearward to open
the sunroof. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement, and the sunroof will
remain in a partially open position until the
switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the button and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur
regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
Closing Sunroof
Express Closing
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully close
automatically from any position.
Manual Closing
Push and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the switch
is pushed again.
107
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
Pinch Protection Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
108
O P E R AT I N G Y O U R V E H I C L E
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, adjust the front and rear windows together.
If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust any
window. This will minimize buffeting.
109
ELECTRONICS
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM
1. Uconnect Phone Button pg. 172
2. Uconnect Voice Command Button pg. 155
3. Phone Hang Up Button pg. 172
4. Steering Wheel Audio Control (Left) pg. 182
5. Steering Wheel Audio Control (Right) pg. 182
6. Volume/Mute Knob
7. Screen Off Button
8. Power Outlet pg. 189
110
ELECTRONICS
9. Uconnect System pg. 141
10. Back Button
11. Tune/Scroll Knob — Browse/Enter Button
12. AUX Jack pg. 148
13. USB Port pg. 148
14. SD Card Slot pg. 148
111
ELECTRONICS
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and
wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information.
This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with
its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or
other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and
performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even
if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs,
CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals.
112
ELECTRONICS
IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO
Uconnect 5.0
• 5” Touchscreen
• Three buttons on the faceplate on either
side of the display
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• HD Button will not be visible on right
side of screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature not listed
within Apps (US Market Only)
Uconnect 8.4
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
• 8.4” Touchscreen
• HD Button will be visible on right side of
screen when viewing AM or FM
• SiriusXM Travel Link feature listed
within Apps (US Market Only)
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
1 — Navigation Standard On 8.4 NAV
113
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT ACCESS
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (Available On Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV — U.S.
Residents Only)
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect Access enhances your ownership and driving experience by connecting your
vehicle to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network. When connected to an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network, you can:
• Place a call to a local 9-1-1 Operator for emergency assistance.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect Access App from your device. You can also do so by logging into your
owner site, or by calling Uconnect Access Care when your vehicle has an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
• Turn your vehicle into a 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot and connect your devices to the internet.
• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate your
vehicle if it is stolen.
• Listen to your text messages or send free-form text messages with your voice while
keeping your hands on the wheel, using the Voice Texting feature requires a device that
supports Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP).
• Search for places to eat, shop, relax and play with Yelp, using your voice or on-screen
menu. Then navigate to them (navigation standard on Uconnect 8.4 NAV, optional on
Uconnect 8.4).
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your interior rearview mirror.
114
ELECTRONICS
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect Access services.
1. The ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST button
is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect Access Care.
The 9-1-1 button connects you to emergency services.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 call system capabilities. 9-1-1
or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to
9-1-1 system calls.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is located in the center of the menu bar of the radio
touchscreen. This is where you can manage your Apps and purchase 3G Wi-Fi on
demand.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the left
side of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give commands,
make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the Uconnect Access
Services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification
from your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with Uconnect Access. After
the trial period, if you wish to continue your Uconnect Access Services you can choose to
purchase a subscription.
Uconnect Access Subscription
• After the trial period, you can subscribe by pushing the ASSIST button on the rear-view
mirror and speaking with a Uconnect Access Care agent or by visiting the owner site
Mopar.com. If you need assistance, U.S. residents can call Uconnect Access Care at
1-855-792-4241 .
• For the latest information on packages and pricing information: U.S. residents visit
DriveUconnect.com.
115
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous
States, Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register
with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on
the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps
” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” and
complete the process using your device or
computer.
Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able
to do:
ASSIST Button
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away.
• Discover great, new places around you using Yelp.
• Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both hands on
the wheel!)
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
116
ELECTRONICS
Download The Uconnect Access App
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and sending a destination from
your phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect
Access services, download the Uconnect
Access app to your mobile device. Use
your Owner Account login and password
to open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock,
Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a
map to locate your vehicle or send a
location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle Finder and Send ‘n Go, if
equipped.
Mobile App
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect Access Mobile App allows you to find the
location of your vehicle when you have lost it. You can also sound the alarm and flash the
lights to make finding your vehicle even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Access Mobile App bottom bar.
117
ELECTRONICS
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the location of your vehicle.
Vehicle Icon
3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
Find Route Button
Send ‘N Go
The Send ‘n Go feature of the Uconnect Access Mobile App allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device and then send the route to your vehicle’s native
navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Access Mobile App bottom bar.
118
ELECTRONICS
2. Either type in the destination you would like to navigate to, or search through one of the
categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route
to from the list that appears.
Destination Search Bar
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your
vehicle by pressing the “Go Now” option
on the pop-up that appears on the
touchscreen, when the vehicle is
started.
Send To Vehicle Button
119
ELECTRONICS
Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska And Hawaii)
Subscriptions, and 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot, can be purchased from the Uconnect Store within
your vehicle, and online at your Owner Site. If you need help push the ASSIST button on
the rearview mirror, then select Uconnect Care (or dial 1-855-792-4241 ).
NOTE:
You must set up a Uconnect Access Payment Account online (login to mopar.com, go to
Edit Profile, then Uconnect Payment Account, to set up and manage your Payment
Account).
Getting Started With Apps
Applications (Apps for short) in your Uconnect Access system are designed to deliver the
features and services that you want. There are two basic categories:
1. Built-In Features — use the 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network on your Uconnect
8.4 or 8.4 NAV radio.
2. Uconnect Access Via Mobile — use the Uconnect Access App and your device's data
plan to access your personal Pandora, iHeartRadio, Aha and Slacker accounts from the
vehicle and control them using the touchscreen. Customer's data plan charges will
apply. Available on Uconnect 8.4 and 8.4 NAV Radios (if equipped).
Apps Main Menu
Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to open the Apps main menu, in this
screen you will be able to access all of your available Apps. To access an App directly,
press the corresponding button on the touchscreen and you will be directed to that App.
To view the rest of your Apps, press the page forward or page back button.
120
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Apps
1 — Apps Button
2 — Page Forward Button
App Manager
Press the “App Manager” button to access the following categories:
Favorite Apps — This is the default screen when you first press the “App Manager” button
on the touchscreen, and is a good place to put the apps you use most frequently. To make
an App a “favorite”, press the “star” button on the touchscreen on the right side of the
App.
All Apps — All of your available Apps will reside in the “All Apps” folder.
Running Apps — Press this tab to see which apps are currently running.
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your Uconnect Access
Account information from the vehicle. You can do this on your Owner’s site website at
mopar.com. Removing your account information cancels your subscription and makes
your vehicle factory-ready for a new owner/subscriber.
For additional information
1-877-855-8400
on
Uconnect,
visit
DriveUconnect.com
or
call
121
ELECTRONICS
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have 9-1-1 Call service if
needed. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the airbag system. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly
and the 9-1-1 system may not send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator if an air bag is
deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference
that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g.,
two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps and services,
among others, will not operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
122
ELECTRONICS
1. Assist Call (8.4/8.4 NAV) — The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push button, and
the touchscreen contains a Uconnect Access App, which will automatically connect
the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined destinations for immediate support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you
get a flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be
connected to someone who can help
anytime. Additional fees may apply.
Additional information in this section.
• Uconnect Access Care — In vehicle
support for Uconnect Access System, Apps and Features.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
2. Emergency 9-1-1 Call (If Equipped) —
The rearview mirror contains a 9-1-1
9-1-1 Button And ASSIST
button that, when pushed, may place a
call from your vehicle to a local 9-1-1 1 — 9-1-1 Button
operator to request help from local po- 2 — ASSIST Button
lice, fire or ambulance personnel. If this
button is accidentally pressed, you will
have ten seconds to stop the call. To cancel, push the 9-1-1 Call button again or press
the “Cancel” button shown on the touchscreen. After ten seconds has passed, the
9-1-1 call will be placed and only the 9-1-1 operator can cancel it. The LED light on
the rearview mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been
made. The green LED light will turn off once the 9-1-1 call is terminated. Have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle if the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On
equipped vehicles, this feature requires a functioning electrical system and an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection to function properly. If a
connection is made between a 9-1-1 operator and your vehicle, you understand and
agree that 9-1-1 operators may, like any other 9-1-1 call, record conversations and
sounds in and near your vehicle upon connection.
3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) — If your vehicle is equipped with this feature and
has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection, you may be able to
connect with Roadside Assistance by pushing the "ASSIST" button on the rearview
mirror. You will be presented with Assist Care options. Make a selection by pressing the
prompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside Assistance is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you
may incur. In order to provide Uconnect Services to you, we may record and monitor
your conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care or Vehicle Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the Uconnect Services in your vehicle, your
device or via a landline device, and may share information obtained through such
123
ELECTRONICS
recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information
obtained through any such call recordings.
4. Yelp — Customers have the ability to search for nearby destinations or a Point Of
Interest (POI) either by category or custom search by using keywords (for example,
“Italian restaurant”). Searching can be done by either voice or by using the touchscreen keypad. Using the touchscreen, launch Yelp by selecting the “Apps
” icon,
then press “Yelp.” To use voice recognition, push the VR button on the steering wheel
and say “launch Yelp,” then follow the instructions on the Teleprompter.
5. Theft Alarm Notification — The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies you via email
or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm system has
been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have been triggered,
one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the details of the
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you register, Theft Alarm Notification is
automatically set to send you an email at the email address you provide should the
alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text message sent to your device.
6. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed, Uconnect
care can help locate your vehicle. The Uconnect Care agent will ask for the stolen
vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As long as your vehicle has an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection, the Uconnect Care Agent
may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to help recover
it. Your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection
and must be registered with Uconnect Access with an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
7. 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot — The 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle feature that connects your
device to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network using Uconnect Access and
is ready to go where ever you are. Once your vehicle is registered for Uconnect Access,
you can purchase a 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot subscription at the Uconnect Store. After you've
made your purchase, turn on your signal and connect your passengers devices. It's
never been easier to bring your home or office with you.
WARNING!
NEVER use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when you are driving the vehicle. As the driver, you
should only use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle Uconnect
features to operate.
124
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Access Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android powered device, the Uconnect Access App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start and your
vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. Services
can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. You can
download the App from your Owner’s site or from the App Store (iPhone) or Google Play
Store (Android). Visit UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible device.
2. From your Owner’s site website.
• After 15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will
shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remote started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installed
Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect Access App is
downloaded, login with your user name and password.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. Press the “remote start” icon on your Uconnect Access App to remotely start the
vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com, and click on
Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door on
your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible device.
2. From the your Owner’s site website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect Access App to lock the doors, and
press the “open lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.
125
ELECTRONICS
You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and click on
Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded, or noisy parking
area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your
vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a compatible device.
2. From the your Owner’s site website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications.
Voice Texting — Want to dictate a personal message? Register with Uconnect Access to
take advantage of a new, cloudbased Voice Texting service: an enhancement to Voice Text
Reply.
Voice Texting allows you to compose a new text or reply to an incoming text message.
Before you attempt to use the Voice Texting feature, check to ensure you have the
following:
1. A paired Bluetooth enabled device with the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not all
Bluetooth enabled devices support MAP, including all iPhones (Apple iOS). Visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility information.
2. An active Uconnect Access trial or paid subscription.
3. Accept the “Allow MAP” profile request on your device. (Please refer to device
manufacturer instructions for details).
To Send A Text Message:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone Button
on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the beep.
3. Say “Text.”
4. Uconnect will prompt you “Say the phone number, or full name and phone type of the
contact you want to send a message to.”
5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is in your phonebook, or a mobile phone
number that you would like to send the message to.
6. Uconnect will prompt you “Please say the message that you would like to send.” (If you
do not hear this prompt, you may not have an active subscription with Uconnect
Access).
126
ELECTRONICS
7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any message up to 140 characters. If you exceed
140 characters, you will hear the following prompt: “Message was too long; your
message will be truncated.”
8. Uconnect will then repeat the message back to you.
9. Uconnect will prompt you: “To add to your message, say “Continue”; To delete the
current message and start over, say “Start Over”; to send the current message, say
“Send”; to hear the message again, say “Repeat.”
10. If you are happy with your message and would like to send it, wait for the beep and
say “Send.”
11. Uconnect will then say “Sending your message.”
Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting
Example Command
Action
Send a message to specific contact in ad“Text John Smith”
dress book
Send 123 456 7890 a message from your
“Text 123 456 7890”
phonebook
See recent text messages listed by number
“Show messages”
on Uconnect screen
“Listen to/view (message number four, for
Hear messages or read it on Uconnect
example)”
screen
“Reply”
Send a voice text reply to a current message
Forward current text to specific contact in
“Forward text/message to “John Smith”
address book
Forward current text to specific phone num“Forward text/message to “123 456 7890”
ber
127
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 5.0
Uconnect 5.0
1 — Preset Buttons
2 — SEEK Up Button
3 — Compass Information Button
4 — Climate Functions Button
5 — MORE Functions Button
6 — Browse/Enter Button
7 — Back Button
8 — Audio Button
9 — Info Button
10 — Direct Tune Button
11 — AM/FM/SXM Button
12 — Screen Off Button
13 — Volume Knob/Mute Button
14 — SEEK Down Button
15 — Uconnect Phone Button
16 — Media Mode Button
17 — Radio Mode Button
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure:
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate. Next press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen and then press the “Clock and Date” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, then select the “AM”
or “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the touchscreen.
128
ELECTRONICS
4. Once the time is set, press the “Done” button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock
display in the status bar on or off.
Equalizer, Balance And Fade
To adjust the Audio settings:
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to open the Audio menu.
The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desired
settings. Press the “back arrow” button on the touchscreen when done.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the “arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the
front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button on the
touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the “back arrow”
button on the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjustable
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to select between OFF,
1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
Press the “back arrow” button on the touchscreen when done.
Loudness
• Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes. Press the “back
arrow” button on the touchscreen when done.
129
ELECTRONICS
Radio Operation
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Screen
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Show All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
Seek Up
5 — Station Info
6 — Direct Tune
7 — Radio Band
8 — Seek Down
/Seek Down
• Press the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
Store Radio Presets Manually
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. Four presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen. Pressing the “All” button on the touchscreen on the radio
home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
130
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 channels
Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the RADIO button on the faceplate and then
the “SXM” button on the touchscreen
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for
Canadian residents. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius
satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio
service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. © 2015 Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
Disc Operation
Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console storage bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA button
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on the
illustration located on the Disc player.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a desired
track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the
browse function.
131
ELECTRONICS
Media Hub — iPod/USB/MP3/SD Card
To select a specific audio source, push the
MEDIA button on the radio faceplate. To
allow music to play from your portable device through the vehicle’s speakers, press
the “Source” button then select one of the
following modes:
Uconnect Media Hub
USB/iPod
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable
into the USB port or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the radio faceplate.
1 — AUX Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Port
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a portable device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm stereo audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
• The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the
buttons on the radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device.
Bluetooth
• If using a Bluetooth - equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
SD Card
• SD Card Mode allows you to play music that has been saved to your SD Card through
your vehicle’s sound system.
• You can enter SD Card Mode by either inserting a SD Card into the SD Card slot or by
pushing the “SD Card” button on the left side of the display while in media mode.
For further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With iPhone)
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and read it to your over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of the
18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s how:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button
and wait for the beep, then say “reply.”
Uconnect will give the following prompt: “Please say the message you would like to
send.”
132
ELECTRONICS
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined messages. (If you are not sure, you can
say “help”). Uconnect will then read the pre-defined messages allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you would like to send, you can interrupt the list of
prompts by pushing the Uconnect phone button and saying the phrase. Uconnect will
confirm the message by reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
Yes.
No.
Okay.
Call me.
I’ll call you later.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without me.
I’ll be late.
Where are you?
I will be <number> minutes
late.
Are you there yet?
I need directions.
Can’t talk right now.
See you in <number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device enabled
with Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP). iPhone and some other smartphones do
not currently support Bluetooth MAP. Visit UconnectPhone.com for system and device
compatibility.
Want to dictate a personal message? You must first register with Uconnect Access (U.S.
residents only) to take advantage of a new, cloud-based Voice Texting service, an
enhancement to Voice Text Reply.
133
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system.
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect 5.0
134
ELECTRONICS
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
Uconnect VR/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate, To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
3 — Push To End Call
135
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues
136
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
137
ELECTRONICS
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and
genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
138
ELECTRONICS
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button
and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
139
ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button
Listen. (Must have compatible device paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button
beep, say: Reply.
and say
. After the
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
Yes.
No.
Okay.
Call me.
I’ll call you later.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without me.
I’ll be late.
Where are you?
I will be <number> minutes
late.
Are you there yet?
I need directions.
See you in <number> minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
Thanks.
TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com for
U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle.
4. Turn On “Show Notifications.”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped
with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice
to send a text message.
iPhone Notification Setting
140
ELECTRONICS
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect are
registered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. SiriusXM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect
Security PIN ready when you call.
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV At A Glance
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio Screen
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
141
ELECTRONICS
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the
screen.
Setting The Time
• Model 8.4 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the instructions below
for Model 8.4 NAV.
• For Model 8.4, turn the unit on, then press the time display at the top of the screen.
Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, then
check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like
to set a theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen to
adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press
and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
142
ELECTRONICS
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Personalized Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an
active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
143
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.
144
ELECTRONICS
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the screen, and
entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM).
They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band,
press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between
the two sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4 NAV) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided with a clear sound that enhances the
listening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as song title or artist.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
Get every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra
channels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on the
main Radio screen.
The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode:
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through channels in SXM mode.
145
ELECTRONICS
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channel
once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen on
the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Tune Start
• The Tune Start feature begins playing a song from the beginning when you tune to your
favorite preset SXM channel. Tune Start can be enabled or disabled through the
SiriusXM setup page.
Jump
• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and gives
you the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the feature. After
listening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the previous channel.
Fav
• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press
“Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then be alerted
any time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other SiriusXM
channels.
Album Art
• When arriving at a station, the Channel Art will be displayed to the left of the station
information. After five seconds the Channel Art will be replaced with the Album Art (if
available).
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then select
Channel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped. They
will not show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)
and request the Family-Friendly Package.
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
146
ELECTRONICS
Browse
Sub-Menu
All
Genre
Presets
Favorites
Game Zone
Jump
Sub-Menu Description
Shows the channel listing.
Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the selected
genre.
Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or press
Enter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can icon to
delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main Satellite
Radio screen.
Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure Alert
Settings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on other
channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites.
Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which is
being aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is announced. You can select and manage your Teams list here, and configure
alerts.
Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information, which is
used by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio screen.
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay
Option
Play/Pause
Rewind/RW
Fast
Forward/FW
Replay Time
Live
Option Description
Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume playback.
Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to
rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.
Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast
Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.
Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your
content lags the Live channel.
Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound
content.
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (U.S. residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadian
residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
Sirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI.
©2016 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
147
ELECTRONICS
Disc Operation — If Equipped
• Your vehicle may have a remote CD player located in the lower center console storage
bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting a CD/Disc or by pressing the MEDIA
button. Once in Media Mode, select “Disc.”
• Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing as indicated on the
illustration located on the Disc player.
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Press to seek through Disc tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without stopping.
Browse
• Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a desired
track on the Disc. Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the
browse function.
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/SD Card — If Equipped
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players, USB devices, or SD Cards
through your vehicle's sound system. Press
your Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s
sound system, using a 3.5 mm audio
cable, to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — AUX Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Port
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary device if the audio jack is connected, allowing
the music from your device to be heard through the vehicle's speakers. To activate the
AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons. The volume may be
controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
148
ELECTRONICS
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the specific
device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the system will take
approximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the
reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process is
needed to ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first time it is
connected. After the first time, the reading process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the playlist.
SD Card
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.
• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to
play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If using a Bluetooth equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be Bluetooth compatible and
paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing instructions). You can access
button
the music from your connected Bluetooth device by pressing the Bluetooth
on the touchscreen while in Media mode.
149
ELECTRONICS
Media Controls
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Cue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
The controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen and choosing
between Disc, AUX, USB, Bluetooth or SD Card.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
Navigation
• The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the 8.4 NAV system
or the Navigation has been activated on your 8.4 system.
• If you have a Uconnect 8.4 system your radio is “Navigation-Ready,” and can be
equipped with Navigation at an extra cost. Please see your dealer for details.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system.
150
ELECTRONICS
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “View Map” button on the touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu.
2. With the map displayed, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the lower
right area of the screen.
3. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
4. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
1 — Find A Destination
2 — View Map
3 — Information
4 — Emergency
5 — Navigation Settings
6 — Stop A Route
7 — Detour A Route
8 — Repeat Route Guidance Prompt
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
151
ELECTRONICS
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
button on the steering wheel, wait for
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
the beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Commands to enter an address while moving. Refer to Common Navigation
Voice Commands in the Uconnect Voice Command section.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation
system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home” button on
the touchscreen.
• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home address, or
choose from recently found locations.
• To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new Home
location, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen from the Main Navigation
menu, then press the “Go Home” button on the touchscreen, and in the Yes screen
press the “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu press the “Clear
Home” button on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by following the previous
instructions.
152
ELECTRONICS
Go Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press
the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home” button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route, your
route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop. When
another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous route, add
as the first destination or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “Yes” button on the touchscreen.
153
ELECTRONICS
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the service is
integrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic can help drivers pick the
fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station of
your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check a variety of local and national weather information from radar maps
to current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the background.
You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
154
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year trial
subscription included with your vehicle purchase.
SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.
UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If
not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibility and to find device
pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your
steering wheel.
155
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
1. Uconnect Phone Button
receive a text.
, Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call, send or
2. Uconnect Voice Recognition Button
.
a. Short Press: Push and release the VR button to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation,
and other embedded functions. After you hear the single beep, say a command.
b. Long Press: Push and hold continuously for a few milliseconds, then release the
VR button for Siri functions. After you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say a
command.
3. Phone Hang Up Button.
156
ELECTRONICS
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues
appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
157
ELECTRONICS
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
158
ELECTRONICS
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available
159
ELECTRONICS
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Enable Siri
1 — Select Settings On Your iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound system. Refer to “Uconnect Phone”
in “Electronics” for a detailed pairing procedure.
Pair Your iPhone
160
ELECTRONICS
2. Push and Hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After
you hear the familiar Siri "double beep,"
say a command.
NOTE:
A push and release of the
button will
start normal embedded VR functions. The
push and hold, then release of the
button will start Siri functions.
VR/Siri Button
3. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• "Play Rolling Stones"
• "Send text message to John"
• "Read text message from Sarah"
• "Take me to the nearest coffee shop"
161
ELECTRONICS
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead to ensure your
command is understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Siri Eyes Free
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth, and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice
operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
162
ELECTRONICS
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and
genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S. residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for device compatibility and pairing instructions.
Canadian residents can visit:
• UconnectPhone.com for device compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands…
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has
multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
163
ELECTRONICS
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button
Listen. (Must have compatible device paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button
beep, say: Reply.
and say
. After the
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
Yes.
No.
Okay.
Call me.
I’ll call you later.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without me.
I’ll be late.
Where are you?
I will be <number> minutes
late.
Are you there yet?
I need directions.
See you in <number> minutes.
Can’t talk right now.
Thanks.
TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com for
U.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle.
4. Turn On “Show Notifications.”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped
with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice
to send a text message.
iPhone Notification Setting
164
ELECTRONICS
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable
while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel (if
equipped).
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
165
ELECTRONICS
Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: Enter state.
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a Point Of Interest (POI) search, push the VR button
say “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Navigation
166
. After the beep,
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access
services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access, press the
“Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is not connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network, the signal strength bars on the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen will show a single bar and a prohibition symbol to indicate your vehicle is not connected to an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network.
• Uconnect Access is available only on properly equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii when connected to an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
CALL
9 11
9-1-1 Call
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Yelp Search
Remote Vehicle Start**
Voice Texting
Remote Horn and Lights
Vehicle Finder
Text
Send ‘N Go
Roadside Assistance Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is properly equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
167
ELECTRONICS
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register
with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on
the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, press the “Apps
” button on
the touchscreen, then select the Uconnect
registration app to “Register By Web” to
complete the process using your device or
computer.
For further information
www.driveuconnect.com
please
visit
Uconnect 8.4 Registration
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and sending a destination from
your phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect
Access
services,
download
the
Uconnect Access app to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login
and password to open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock,
Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a
map to locate your vehicle or send a
location to your Uconnect Navigation
using Vehicle Finder and Send ‘n Go , if
equipped.
Mobile App
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app
settings
168
ELECTRONICS
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled
device to use your voice to send a personalized text message. (Not compatible with
iPhone.)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
to John Smith.”
. After the beep, say: “Send message
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait
for Uconnect to process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add
to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect what you’d
like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with your message, after the beep, say “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled
device to use your voice to send a personalized text message. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
1. Select “Settings.”
2. Select “Bluetooth.”
3. Select the (i) for the paired vehicle.
4. Turn on “Show Notifications.”
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped
with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the
feature.
iPhone Notification Setting
169
ELECTRONICS
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice to search for the most
popular places or things around you.
1. Push the VR button
. After the beep, say: Launch YELP.
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button
then say: YELP search.
,
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect the place or business
that you’d like Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the
Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
170
ELECTRONICS
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV — US Market Only)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the five - day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show five - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect are
registered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. SiriusXM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect
Security PIN ready when you call.
171
ELECTRONICS
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
172
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book (Contains
9-1-1)
12 — End Call
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Manage Paired Mobile Phones
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
(Contains 9-1-1)
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires
Bluetooth MAP profile)
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other
wirelessly.
173
ELECTRONICS
If the Uconnect Phone Button
Uconnect Phone features.
exists on your steering wheel, you then have the
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however some
mobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features to utilize
all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile phone and
software are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com
for complete mobile phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 5.0:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
174
Uconnect 5.0
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu
Bar on the touchscreen.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 8.4 & 8.4 NAV
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Pairing Request
175
ELECTRONICS
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically
when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can
be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
Uconnect Device
5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check “Do
Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you can make
calls by saying the name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile phone matches the passkey shown
on the Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Pairing Request
176
ELECTRONICS
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically
when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can
be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
your steering wheel to begin.
on
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairing
and for a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the Phone main screen to mute and unmute
the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated each time that
the phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the settings on
your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing can
only be done on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen,
then the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
177
ELECTRONICS
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater system
accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for
example.
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to the
button on the
entire list. When you hear the command that you need, push the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone button
example, "Help".
, then say a command. For
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone button
"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup button
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
on the steering wheel and say
or the VR button
and say
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is
a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
178
ELECTRONICS
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be viewed/
read.
To enable incoming text messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
179
ELECTRONICS
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to accept a request for permission to connect to
your messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted
from the Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features require a compatible mobile device
enabled with Bluetooth Message Access
Profile (MAP). iPhone, and some other
smartphones, may not entirely support
Bluetooth MAP. Visit UconnectPhone.com
for the latest system and device compatibility.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text Messages
• Due to the extremely large number of mobile phone manufacturers, your mobile device
may not be listed. For further assistance, contact Uconnect Customer Care
at1-877-855-8400 for U.S. residents or, 1-800-465-2001 (English) /
1-800-387-9983 (French) for Canadian residents.
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of the
18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s How:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button
and wait for the beep, then say “reply.”
Uconnect will give the following prompt: “Please say the message you would like to
send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-defined messages. (If you are not sure, you can
say “help”). Uconnect will then read the pre-defined messages allowed.
180
ELECTRONICS
3. As soon as you hear the message you would like to send, you can interrupt the list of
prompts by pushing the Uconnect phone button and saying the phrase. Uconnect will
confirm the message by reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “send.”
Yes.
No.
Okay.
Call me.
I’ll call you later.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without me.
I’ll be late.
Where are you?
I will be <5, 10, 15,...etc.>
minutes late.
Are you there yet?
I need directions.
Can’t talk right now.
See you in <5, 10,
15,...etc.> of minutes.
Thanks.
NOTE:
To make the SMS voice reading function available, the SMS notification option on your
phone must be enabled; this option is usually available on the phone, in the Bluetooth
connections menu for a device registered as Uconnect. After enabling this function on the
mobile phone, it must be disconnected and reconnected with the Uconnect system in
order to make it effective.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings
(Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer
or cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hard
reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications that
may be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow
“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Uconnect system, usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile
phone.
• If your vehicle system does not generate a pin code, the default is 0000.
181
ELECTRONICS
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect
5.0 system phonebook.
Text messaging won’t work:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “connect to your messages” request on your
mobile phone.
• Verify that your mobile phone has the Bluetooth feature (Message Access Profile).
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while connected to Bluetooth will disable
Hands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the AUX
jack.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase
or decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/SXM.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select
the next preset station.
Steering Wheel Controls
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows the
driver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings. Refer to “Programmable
Features” in this section for further information.
182
ELECTRONICS
• Push the up arrow button to scroll upward through the main menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Fuel
Economy, Trip, Audio, Stored Messages,
Stop/Start and Screen Set Up).
• Push the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• Push the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item.
• Push the back/left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the instrument cluster
display will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the
instrument cluster display turns off. The compass will now function normally.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu Selectable Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Speed Warning
• Trip
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Stop/Start
NOTE:
Refer to your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
183
ELECTRONICS
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features
The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings
through buttons on the touchscreen.
• Push the MORE or SETTINGS button (Uconnect 5.0), or press the “Apps” button
(Uconnect 8.4) located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to access the Settings screen. When making a selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. The following feature settings are available:
• Display
• Voice
• Clock
• Safety & Driving Assistance
• Lights
• Compass (Uconnect 5.0)
• Doors & Locks
• Auto-On Comfort
• Engine Off Options
• Audio
• Phone/Bluetooth
• SiriusXM Setup
• Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
• System Information
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s
Manual on www.dodge.com/owners/manuals.
Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup
The following settings allow you to change what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is displayed:
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temperature
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average MPH (L/100km, km/L)
• Current MPH (L/100km, km/L)
• Trip A (Distance Only)
• Trip B (Distance Only)
Trip A
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and release
the OK button to display the Trip A information.
Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and release
the OK button to display the Trip B information.
184
ELECTRONICS
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
Push the right arrow button and the next screen will display the following:
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar graph)
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
• The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
• Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
• For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink system.
• Erase all channels before you begin proHomeLink buttons
gramming. To erase the channels, place
the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position, then press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
185
ELECTRONICS
Programming A Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995, these Garage
Door Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
hanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the button that is
normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the “LEARN” button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the
button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activated,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
7. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE:
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
186
ELECTRONICS
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If
the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door
(or device) should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
6. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur
for the programmed device (e.g., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause
you and others to be severely injured or killed.
187
ELECTRONICS
POWER INVERTER
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 150 Watts.
NOTE:
• The power inverter is designed with
built-in overload protection. If the power
rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut
down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset.
• If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset
the inverter manually, unplug the device
and plug it in again. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the
inverter.
Power Inverter
1 — USB Ports (Charging Only)
2 — Power Inverter Outlet
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
188
ELECTRONICS
POWER OUTLET
The front power outlet is located in the front center storage bin of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
There is one power outlet located in the center console.
The rear power outlet is located in the right
rear cargo area.
The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
while the outlets labeled with a “battery”
are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
Center Console Outlet
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need
to be replaced. See below image for fuse locations.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet, as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
189
ELECTRONICS
• The rear cargo power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the time by
switching the power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Rear Quarter Power Outlet Fuse
1 — F90–F91 Fuse 20A
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
190
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only) transfer case, which provides
convenient full-time all-wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with
traction.
NOTE:
This system is not appropriate for conditions where AWD LOW range is recommended.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” in the Owner's Manual at
www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Three-Position Switch)
This electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the AWD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the center console.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD
AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
When additional traction is required, the
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. The LOW RANGE position are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the LOW RANGE positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
AWD Control Switch
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the engine speed is approximately three
times that of the AWD HI position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
191
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
NOTE:
The “SERV AWD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift all-wheel drive system. If
this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
Shifting Procedures
AWD Auto To Low Range
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some gear noise may be heard. This noise is
normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
• Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or
completely stopped. Use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.
192
OFF-ROAD CAPABILITIES
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in
process, the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original
position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
WARNING!
• Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle
to roll which may cause personal injury.
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Neutral
See the Recreational Towing section for instructions on shifting the transfer case into or
out of Neutral.
193
UTILITY
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails. When
installed, the roof rack can hold a maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed
weight.
Installing The Crossbars
1. To install the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends and slide the
crossbar out from its stowed position.
2. Bend the pivot points at each end of the crossbar and push the thumb screw down.
NOTE:
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
3. Set the crossbars into position, slide them into the groove and tighten the thumb
screws.
Refer to “Roof Luggage Rack” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” in the
Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further details.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
RATINGS)
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
194
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Combined
Frontal Area (Gross Trailer
Wt. Rating)
Wt.)
RWD Light
8,900 lbs
40 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Duty Cooling
(4,037 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1,588 kg)
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
RWD
(5,262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2,812 kg)
AWD Light
8,900 lbs
40 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Duty Cooling
(4,037 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1,588 kg)
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
AWD
(5,262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2,812 kg)
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,400 lbs
RWD
(5,942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3,357 kg)
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,200 lbs
AWD
(5,942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3,266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Model
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
620 lbs
(281 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
620 lbs
(281 kg)
740 lbs
(336 kg)
720 lbs
(327 kg)
UTILITY
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of
occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting And
Operating” in the Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue
load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be
necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs
(1 769 kg).
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs
tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the bottom center
of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
1/4 turn counterclockwise and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward (towards
you).
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Cover Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
195
UTILITY
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you) then downwards to disengage the
tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch
receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to
installation.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Cover Tab Locations
2 — Locking Retainers
196
UTILITY
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
RearWheel
Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Trans- With Two-Speed Transfer
fer Case
Case
•
•
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
•
•
Front
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission
In
PARK
Transfer Case In NEUTRAL (N)
Tow In Forward Direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in
the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
197
UTILITY
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in
the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in
PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take
place with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with
all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL(N)” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
198
UTILITY
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing:
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine off will automatically place the transmission in PARK.
11. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button again (without pressing the brake pedal), if
needed, to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
199
UTILITY
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the transmission into
PARK.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF.
200
UTILITY
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
201
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Dial toll-free
1-800-521-2779
for U.S. Residents or
1-800-363-4869
for Canadian Residents.
• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.
• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.
• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent, we will
contact local police or safety authorities.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
Instrument Cluster Warning Lights
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
202
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised.
Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the
dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
203
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic
system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case,
the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated
by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake
Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system
is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
204
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application.
— Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD
II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The
vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving
cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or
park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
205
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
• To improve the vehicle's traction when starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may
be desirable to switch the ESC system to Partial Off mode by momentarily pushing the
switch located below the climate controls, on the switch panel.
ESC Off
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If the battery charge
warning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system.
We recommend you do not continue driving if it is on. Have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is
not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the
ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the
PARK position; the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see an authorized service center immediately. If the light is flashing when the
engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Getting Started” for further information.
206
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
NOTE:
The Air Bag System is designed to be maintenance free.
Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights
— Low Fuel Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L).
This light will turn on and a single chime will sound.
— Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
A tone will chime, and an instrument cluster display message will appear if either turn
signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
A — Stop/Start Indicator — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
— Front Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
— Park/Headlight ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
— Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm
is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The
security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
— Cruise Control ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the Cruise Control has been activated to the “Ready”
position.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the cruising speed has been set.
— Door Open Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when a door(s) is left open and not fully closed.
207
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
— Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
— Liftgate Ajar Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is left ajar and not fully closed.
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will flash in the instrument cluster display for approximately 5 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
• Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
• Push and release the right arrow button to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
• Push and hold the OK button until the screen shows 100% oil life.
• Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
• Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
• Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
• Push and release the right arrow button to access the “Oil Life” screen.
• Push and hold the OK button until the screen shows 100% oil life.
• Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
208
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action:
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
209
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not
be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area, below the load
floor.
Jack Location
210
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to loosen the jack and remove from
the bracket.
Jack Removal
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch
mechanism. To remove or stow the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to the
square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under a
plastic cover at the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate opening.
Spare Tire Location
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down. Impact type tools can damage the
winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from storage compartment floor.
211
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the lug wrench handle and
extension to completely lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the winch
stops.
Winch Drive Nut Location
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it vertically behind the rear bumper.
Spare Tire Removal
212
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull the metal stamping toward you
to release it from the plastic plate.
Spare Tire Retainer
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube and winch cable. Rotate the
metal stamping and push it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
Retainer Removal
213
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the protective plate from the steel
spare wheel.
Protective Plate Removal
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Wheel Blocked
214
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage
to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed
with the valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated
in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left, one turn,
while the wheel is still on the ground.
215
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack and Tools Assembled
Jacking Locations
216
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the
rear tire. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle just
enough to remove the flat tire.
Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
217
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.
Spare Tire Mounting
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from inside the aluminum road
wheel and position the wheel behind the rear bumper with the protective plate facing
outward.
NOTE:
The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel
from being scratched when sliding it under
the vehicle.
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic
protective plate in the lug holes of the
road wheel. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and
stamped cone shape wheel plate
though the road wheel and protective
plate.
218
Protective Plate
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protective plate until it is directly under
the winch and between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat shields. Raise the
tire by turning the lug wrench on the winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug
against the underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable may result if the
vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
Flat Tire Storage
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down. Impact-type tools may damage the
winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the tools to the proper positions in
the tool bag. Fold the flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools in the bag
underneath the others. Use the Velcro straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with
the lug wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the jack on the bracket by
turning the thumb screw clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo area. Roll up and store the Jack,
Tool Kit and Tire Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack in the rear
storage bin.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible and properly
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
219
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
220
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger's front seat. There are remote
locations located under the hood to assist in jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to
either vehicle.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the
ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on
the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
221
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection
and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
222
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel and can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post
of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post
of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK
(such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
223
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console hinges.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push
the metal latch in towards the tether
strap.
Manual Park Release Cover Removed
224
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the
tether strap until the lever clicks and latches in the released position. The transmission
is now out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is activated may damage the
Manual Park Release mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release Lever, apply tension upward while pushing the
release latch towards the tether to unlock the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has been unlocked, be sure it is
stowed properly and locks into position.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place.
225
226
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
Front
NONE
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Wheels OFF The Ground
Towing Condition
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
If Transmission Is Operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
If Transmission Is Operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Rear-Wheel Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Two-Speed Transfer
Case
See Instructions under
"Recreational Towing":
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Transfer Case
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner's Manual on www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals
for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again
to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
227
W H AT T O D O I N E M E R G E N C I E S
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Getting Started” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Getting Started” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located on the jacking tool kit. If your vehicle
is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and
proceed to fill the vehicle.
228
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the
center of the hood and push and hold
the safety latch lever to the left while
lifting the hood at the same time.
Hood Release
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
229
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Engine Oil Dipstick
4. Oil Filter Access
5. Engine Oil Fill
230
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Brake Fluid Reservoir
7. Air Cleaner Filter
8. Washer Fluid Reservoir
9. Engine Coolant Reservoir
10. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
231
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3. Engine Oil Dipstick
4. Engine Oil Fill
5. Brake Fluid Reservoir
232
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Air Cleaner Filter
7. Washer Fluid Reservoir
8. Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
9. Engine Coolant Reservoir
10. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
233
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
24.6 Gallons
93.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20,
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20,
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile For10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
mula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
3.6L Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile For11 Quarts
10.4 Liters
mula or equivalent) – With
Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile For15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
mula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile For16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
mula or equivalent) – With
Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
234
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE
5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil
Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use
E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
235
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
236
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake
Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT
4 is acceptable.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
For information on the maintenance procedures for your vehicle, please refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual or an
applicable supplement at www.dodge.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
237
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
238
X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
30,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
50,000
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X
X
X
X
60,000
X
70,000
Replace spark plugs.**
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace engine air filter.
Additional Maintenance
X
X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
80,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
32,000
Inspect the CV joints.
40,000
X
48,000
X
X
X
X
64,000
X
80,000
Or Kilometers:
90,000
X
96,000
X
7
112,000
X
8
128,000
Additional Inspections
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
144,000
6
100,000
160,000
5
110,000
176,000
4
120,000
192,000
3
130,000
208,000
2
140,000
224,000
Or Years:
150,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
239
240
80,000
64,000
48,000
20,000
32,000
Or Kilometers:
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and
performance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING!
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
96,000
X
112,000
Change transfer case fluid.
15
14
13
30,000
12
40,000
11
50,000
10
60,000
9
70,000
8
80,000
128,000
7
90,000
144,000
6
100,000
160,000
5
110,000
176,000
4
120,000
192,000
3
130,000
208,000
2
140,000
224,000
Or Years:
150,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
20,000 Miles
(32,000 km) or
2 Years
30,000 Miles
(48,000 km) or
3 Years
40,000 Miles
(64,000 km) or
4 Years
50,000 Miles
(80,000 km) or
5 Years
60,000 Miles
(96,000 km) or
6 Years
70,000 Miles
(112,000 km) or
7 Years
80,000 Miles
(128,000 km) or
8 Years
Odometer
MAINTENANCE RECORD
Date
Signature,
Authorized Service Center
90,000 Miles
(144,000 km) or
9 Years
100,000 Miles
(160,000 km) or
10 Years
110,000 Miles
(176,000 km) or
11 Years
120,000 Miles
(192,000 km) or
12 Years
130,000 Miles
(208,000 km) or
13 Years
140,000 Miles
(224,000 km) or
14 Years
150,000 Miles
(240,000 km) or
15 Years
Odometer
Date
Signature,
Authorized Service Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
241
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This center contains
cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
242
Cavity
F03
F05
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
F06
40 Amp Green
–
F07
F09
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
F10
40 Amp Green
–
F11
30 Amp Pink
–
F12
F13
F14
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
F24
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension —
If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine
only)/Brake Vacuum Pump
Body Controller/Exterior Lighting
#2
Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If
Equipped
Body Controller #3/Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F25
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
F28
20 Amp Blue
–
F29
20 Amp Blue
–
F30
30 Amp Pink
–
F32
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
F39
F40
30 Amp Pink
–
–
10 Amp Red
F42
F44
F49
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F50
–
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F56
–
15 Amp Blue
F57
F58
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
F59
F60
F61
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F64
–
25 Amp Clear
Description
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If
Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If
Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC — If
Equipped
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/
Headlamp Leveling
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack/Climate
Control
Air Suspension Control Module —
If Equipped
Ignition Node Module/Keyless
Ignition/Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
— If Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine
only)
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH — If
Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Transmission Control Module/PM
Sensor (Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater
(Diesel)
Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
243
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
244
Cavity
F66
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
F72
F73
F75
F76
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F77
–
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
F80
–
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
F92
–
10 Amp Red
F93
F94
F95
F96
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
F98
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Sunroof/Passenger Window
Switches/Rain Sensor
CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free
Module — If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
PCM — If Equipped
HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front
Axle Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module/Electric
Power Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener/
Compass/Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/
Cruise Control/DTV
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension — If Equipped /
Trailer Tow / Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp — If
Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter/Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera/ParkSense
Rear Seat Heater Switch/
Flashlamp Charger - If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated
Steering Wheel - If Equipped
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F99
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F100
F101
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
–
10 Amp Red
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Climate Control/Driver Assistance
Systems Module/DSRC
Active Damping — If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart
High Beams — If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/
Rear HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/
Center Console)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release
245
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the
flapper door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank
is full.
Fuel Filler
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
To manually open the fuel door, remove the storage bin located in the left rear cargo area.
1. Push down on inboard edge. This will
pop up the outboard edge.
2. Grab popped up outboard edge with
other hand to disengage snaps.
3. Remove storage bin.
Storage Bin Location
246
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the release cable located in the storage bin opening.
Emergency Release Cable
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
247
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards.
P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based
on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size
molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter "P" is absent
from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The
size designation for LT-Metric tires is the
same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
248
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/
80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– "R" means radial construction, or
– "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a
Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified
pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire
249
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only
be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of
black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard
side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
250
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the
body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum
permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the
sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge
of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
NOTE:
Refer to the Owner's Manual, or the Tire
Information Supplement, located in your
Owner’s Information kit for more information regarding tire warnings and
instructions.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
251
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck
holes can cause damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the
loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section
of the Owner’s Manual, or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s
Information kit.
252
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And
Operating” in the Owner’s Manual, or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your
Owner’s Information kit for further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer
towing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
253
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
254
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce
a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
255
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of
the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the
valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C)
then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your
authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
256
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply
tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should
be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
257
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally
equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/
h), refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full capacity, or to tow a trailer while a
tire is in the Run Flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire
Service Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.
258
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage
to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This
spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle
is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the
size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install
more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle
is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
259
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire
may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling.
Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the
limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
260
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when
your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear
as bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread
is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule
is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
261
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure
that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer
with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some
combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions
and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved
for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result
in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
262
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust
on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use
harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that
helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE:
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can
harm the wheel surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will
permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the
vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor
corrosion.
263
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by
the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires
on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
264
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which
all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Glove Compartment Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
V26377
214–2
906
103
74
265
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL) Bi-Halogen Headlamps (Base)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps (Uplevel)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base)
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium)
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp
(Uplevel & Premium)
Front Side Marker Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
266
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
9005SL+
9005SL+
3157NAK
3157NAK
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced A Authorized Dealer)
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-800-423-6343
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) Phone:
1-800-387-9983 (French)
ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
PUBLICATIONS ORDERING
• If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklet. United States customers may visit the Dodge Contact Us page at
www.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Material” from the left menu. You
may also obtain a complimentary copy by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits, DVDs, or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet, or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the Chrysler,
Jeep®, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
267
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/.
268
MOPAR® ACCESSORIES
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR
• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Dodge Durango.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Molded Running Boards
• Tubular Side Steps
• Front End Cover
• Wheels
• Chrome Front Air Deflector
• Molded Splash Guards
• Chrome Accents
INTERIOR:
• Heated Seats
• Door Sill Guards
• All-Weather Mats
• Katzkin Leather Interiors
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Ambient Lighting
• Molded Cargo Tray
• Bright Pedal Kit
ELECTRONICS:
• Mopar Web (WiFi)
• Rear View Camera
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking • Remote Start
System
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-Mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Box Cargo Carrier
• Roof Rack
• Hitch Receiver
• Roof Mount Ski and Snow- • Roof Mount Water Sports
board Carrier
Carrier
• Park Distance Sensors
• Roof Mount Bike Carrier
• Cargo Basket
269
F R E Q U E N T LY A S K E D Q U E S T I O N S
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
GETTING STARTED
How do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 49
How do I program my Front Seat Memory? pg. 60
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE
How does the Automatic Climate Control operate? pg. 98
ELECTRONICS
Which radio is in my vehicle?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 128
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 141
How do I activate the Audio Jack?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 132
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 148
How do I set the clock on my radio?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 128
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 141
How do I use the Navigation feature?
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 150
How do I pair my mobile phone via Bluetooth with the UConnect Hands-Free Voice
Activation System? pg. 172
How do I use my USB port to listen to audio through my touchscreen radio?
• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 132
• Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV pg. 148
How do I configure my Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)? pg. 185
How do I improve the Bluetooth performance of my Uconnect System? pg. 181
270
F R E Q U E N T LY A S K E D Q U E S T I O N S
UTILITY
How do I know how much I can tow with my vehicle? pg. 194
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
What do I do if my TPMS warning light is blinking? pg. 202
How do I change a flat tire? pg. 210
How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 220
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Where is my Fuse Block located? pg. 242
What type of oil do I use? pg. 234
How often should I change my engine’s oil? pg. 237
What should my tire pressure be set at? pg. 251
271
INDEX
Access
Uconnect . . . . . . . .114, 116, 121
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . .237
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . .237
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . .32
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . .30, 206
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . .33
Enhanced Accident Response .38, 228
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .228
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . .37
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . .33
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .39
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .30
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . .55
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .39
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . .237
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .98, 101
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . .237
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . .237
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . .256
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . .17
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . .17
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . .17
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . .17, 207
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . .191
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . .234, 237
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .206
App
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . .117
272
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . .17
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . .202
Audio Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . .86
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . .76
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . .77
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .98
SYNC Temperature Button . . . .102
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Axle Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Charging System Light . . . . . .206
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . .105
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . .237
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . .237
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .204
Break-In Recommendations, New
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .265
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . .183
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4, 268
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . .194
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . .148
Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . .208
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . .210
Charging System Light. . . . . . . . .206
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . .249
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .40
INDEX
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . .52
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Infants And Child Restraints . . . .41
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .46
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Older Children And Child Restraints .42
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . .43
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 263
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . .237
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . .98, 165
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Cluster Warning/Indicator Lights
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . .206
Electronic Speed Control ON
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Electronic Speed Control SET
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . .208
Front Fog Light Indicator . . . . .207
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . .207
Park/Headlight ON Indicator . . .207
Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . .207
Vehicle Security Light . . . . . . .207
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . .259
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . .183
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .237
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . .234
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . .237
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . .237
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . .237
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Points To Remember . . . . . . .237
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . .237
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . .234, 235, 237
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . .237
Customer Assistance. . . . . . .267, 268
Customer Programmable Features . .184
Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . .268
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . .202
Disarming, Security System. . . . . . .17
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . .237
Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Driver Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Driver Information Display
Programmable Features . . . . . .183
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . .94
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. .191
Electronics
Your Vehicle's Sound System . . .110
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . .205
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . .227
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . .220
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Break-In Recommendations . . . .72
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . .237
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . .234
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . .220
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .205
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234, 237
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . .237
Oil Selection . . . . .234, 235, 237
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 228
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
273
INDEX
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . .237
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts.235
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . .65, 66
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . .85
Four Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . .191
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . .191
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . .227
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . .270
Fuel
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . .94
Filler Door Emergency Release . .246
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . .247
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .234
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .235
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .234
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).185, 187
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . .237
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . .172
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
High Beam Indicator. . . . . . . . . .207
HomeLink
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).185, 187
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Identifying Your Radio . . . . . . . . .113
Ignition
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead . . . .11
Key Fob Not Detected . . . . . . . .11
Keyless Ignition . . . . . . . . . . .11
Keyless Push Button . . . . . . . .11
274
Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . .11
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Instrument Cluster Display
Indicator Telltales . . . . . . . . .207
Warning Telltales . . . . . . . . . .202
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . .237
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . .237
Interior And Instrument Lights . . . . . .7
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . .237
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . .73
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
In Vehicle Features
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . .122
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . .188
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio .132, 172
Jacking And Tire Changing
Instructions . . . . . . .
Jacking Instructions . . . .
Jack Location. . . . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .214
. . . .215
. . . .210
.210, 215
. . . .220
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .17
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . .10
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . .10
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . .10, 13
Accessory Postition . . . . . . . . .16
Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . .13, 14, 15
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . .73
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .20
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Liftgate, Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . .75
Lights
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .76
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . .204
INDEX
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . .76
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . .207
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .207
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .202
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Locks
Liftgate, Tailgate . . . . . . . . . .10
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . .237
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . .194
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . .237
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . .237
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . .237
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . .241
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . .237
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Master Cylinder (Brakes). . . . . . . .237
Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Memory Feature (Memory Seat). . . . .60
Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . .60
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . .86
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Mopar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . . . . .269
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . .76
Navigation . . . . . . . . .150, 154, 166
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . .72
Occupant Restraints. . . . . . . . . . .18
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . .208
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . .208
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . .237
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . .237
Materials Added To . . . . . . . .237
Recommendation
Viscosity . . . . .
Oil Filter, Selection. .
Outlet
Power . . . . . .
Overheating, Engine .
. . . . . .234, 237
. . . . . .234, 237
. . . . . . . . .237
. . . . . . . . .189
. . . . . . . . .209
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 12
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . .103
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . .143
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . .172
Phone (Pairing) . . . . . . . . .155, 174
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . .163, 172
Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information . . . . . . . . . .251, 252
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . .242
Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . .107
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .189
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .71
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . .25
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . .214
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programmable Electronic Features . .183
Purchase Apps
Uconnect Access . . . . . .120, 168
Radial Ply Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 144
Radio Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .74
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . .103
Rear Seat, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . .65
275
INDEX
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . .75
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . .64
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . .197
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .17
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . .10
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . .10
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . .10
Remote Starting System . . . . . .10, 12
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . .265
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . .262
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .268
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Right Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . .182
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . .194
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . .248
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . .237
SD Card Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .26
Energy Management Feature . . . .26
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . .23
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . .20
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . .23
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .25
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .24
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . .25
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . .19
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . .237
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .19
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . .24
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . .40
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
276
Front Seat . . . . . . . . .19, 20, 23
Operating Instructions . . . . . . .23
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .25
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . .23
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 63, 67, 68
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .59, 63
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . .65, 66
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . .17
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . .17
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 160
Sirius Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . .145
Traffic & Weather . . . . . . . . . .154
Sirius Travel Link. . . . . . . . . . . .154
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . .148, 150
Spare Tire . . . . . .211, 258, 259, 260
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . .235, 236
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . .79, 80
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . .81
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . .83
Mode Setting (ACC Only) . . . . . .83
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .78
Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . .87
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . .87
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . .69
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . .70, 71
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . .182
Sunroof
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
INDEX
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Telescoping Steering Column. . . .70, 71
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .98
Text Messaging . . .132, 140, 164, 169,
179, 180
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . .70, 71
Tire And Loading Information
Placard . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Tires . . . . . . . . .255, 258, 259, 264
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . .261
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . .251, 255
Changing . . . . . . . . . .210, 219
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . .259
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . .219
General Information .255, 258, 259
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . .256
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Load Capacity . . . . . . . .251, 252
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . .202
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . .264
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Replacement . . . . . . . .219, 262
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . .248, 255
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Spare Tire . . . .211, 258, 259, 260
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .261
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . .219
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . .248
Towing
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .226
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .197
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . .194
Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Transfer Case
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . .191
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 237
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .261
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Uconnect
Access . . . . . . . . .114, 116, 121
Account . . . . . . . .116, 121, 125
Maintaining Your Account . . . . .121
Registration . . . . . . . . .116, 168
Remote Features . . . . . . . . . .125
Using Access . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Uconnect 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . .141, 167
Helpful Tips For Bluetooth . . . . .181
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .177
Voice Recognition Tips . . . . . . .178
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Voice Recognition
SiriusXM Travel Link . . . . . . . .171
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . .114, 167
App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . .122
Purchase Apps . . . . . . . .120, 168
Yelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . .172, 178
Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . . .172
Uconnect Phone. . .155, 172, 177, 179
Uconnect Voice
Command . . . .134, 136, 155, 177
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . .264
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . .23
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Using Access
Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Voice Command . . . . .134, 136, 155,
157, 177
Voice Recognition System (VR).134, 136,
155, 177, 178
277
INDEX
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .73
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . .237, 263
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . .237, 263
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
278
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . .73
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . .237
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . .237
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . .73
Wipers, Rain Sensitive. . . . . . . . . .74
NOTES
279
NOTES
280
IMPORTANT
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important
f e a t u r e s o f y o u r v e h i c l e . Yo u r O w n e r ’s M a n u a l , N a v i g a t i o n / U c o n n e c t
Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be found on your DVD (if applicable)
or by visiting the website on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope
you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
v i s i t i n g w w w. t e c h a u t h o r i t y. c o m a n d C a n a d i a n r e s i d e n t s c a n p u r c h a s e
replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklet by calling
1 800 423-6343 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting
your dealer.
The dri v er ’s p r im a r y r esp o n s i bi l i ty
is the s af e op er a t ion of t h e v e hi c l e .
D ri vi ng w h ile d ist r a ct ed c a n re s u l t
in l o ss of veh icle con t r ol, re s u l ti n g
in a col l ision a n d p er sona l i n j ury.
FCA US LLC st r on g ly r ec o m me n d s
t hat the d r iver u se ex t r em e c a u ti o n
when us in g a n y d evice o r fe atu re
t h at may t a ke t h eir a tte n ti o n
off the ro a d . U se of a n y e l e c tri c a l
devi c es,
su ch
as
c e l l ul ar
t el e phones, com p u t er s, po rta b l e
r adi o s, v eh icle n a vig a t io n o r o th e r
devi c es, b y t h e d r iver w hi l e th e
2989662_17d_Durango_UG_030117.indd 2
v e h i c l e i s mo v i ng i s d a n g e ro u s a n d
c o u l d l e a d to a se ri o u s c o l l i s i o n .
Te xti ng w hi l e dri v i n g i s a l s o
d a n g e ro u s a n d s h o u l d n e v e r b e
d o n e w hi l e the v e hi c l e i s m o v i n g . I f
yo u fi nd yo urs e l f un a b l e to d e v o te
yo u r ful l atte n ti o n to v e h i c l e
o p e ra ti o n, p u l l o f f th e ro a d to a
s a fe l o c a ti o n an d sto p yo u r v e h i c l e .
S o m e s ta te s o r p ro v i n c e s p ro h i b i t
th e u s e o f c e l l u l ar te l e p h o n e s o r
te xti ng w hi l e d ri v in g . I t i s a l wa ys
th e dri v e r’s re s po n s i b i l i ty to c o m p l y
w i th al l l o c a l l aw s .
DODGE.COM (U.S.)
DODGE.CA (CANADA)
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your
new Dodge vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common
questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and
important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional
information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Yo u r d r i v i n g a b i l i t y c a n b e s e r i o u s l y i m p a i r e d w i t h b l o o d a l c o h o l
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
R i d e w i t h a d e s i g n a t e d n o n - d r i n k i n g d r i v e r, c a l l a c a b , a f r i e n d , o r
use public transportation.
WARNING!
D r i v i n g a f t e r d r i n k i n g c a n l e a d t o a n a c c i d e n t . Yo u r p e r c e p t i o n s a r e
l e s s s h a r p , y o u r r e f l e x e s a r e s l o w e r, a n d y o u r j u d g m e n t i s i m p a i r e d
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
3/1/17 11:03 AM
W h et h er it ’s pro v i di ng i nfo rm ati o n a b o u t s p e c i fi c p ro d u c t
f ea t u r es, t a kin g a to ur thro u g h yo ur v e hi c l e ’s h e ri ta g e , k n o wi n g
wh a t st ep s t o ta k e fo l l o w i n g an ac c i de n t o r s c h e d u l i n g yo u r
ne xt ap p oin t m en t , we kno w yo u ’ l l fi n d th e a p p a n i mp o rta n t e xte n s i o n o f
yo ur Dod g e veh icle. S i m pl y do w n l o ad th e a p p , s e l e c t yo u r m a k e a n d
mo del a n d en joy t h e r id e . To ge t th i s ap p , go d i re c tl y to th e A p p S to re o r
Googl e P la y a n d en t er t he s e arc h k e yw o rd “ D o d g e ” (U . S. m a rk e ts o n l y).
Dodge. c o m / E N / O wn e r s p ro v i de s s p e c i al o ffe rs tai l o re d to yo u r n e e d s ,
c ustom iz ed veh icle g al l e ri e s , p e rs o n a l i ze d s e rv i c e re c o rd s a n d m o re .
To ge t th is in f or m a t ion , j u s t c re ate an ac c o u n t an d c he c k b a c k o fte n .
DOWNLOAD A FREE
ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE OWNER’S
MANUAL AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
BY VISITING:
W W W. MOPA R .COM / DODGE,
W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / O W NE R S / M A NU A L S
OR W W W.DODGE .COM / E N / WA R R A N T Y (U.S.);
W W W . O W N E R S . M O P A R . C A / E N ( C A N A D A ).
©2017 F C A U S L L C . A L L R IG H T S R E S E RV E D .
DODGE IS A R E G IS T E R E D T R A D E MA R K O F F C A U S LLC .
17WD01-926-AA
D U R A N GO
F I F T H E DI T I ON REV 1
US E R GUI DE
2017
USER
DURANGO
GUIDE
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising